Fiat 2015 500 Abarth Owner's Manual

2 0 1 6

O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

FIAT

®

500 ABARTH

I N C L U D E S C A B R I O

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA

US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA

Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

4

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

5

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

6

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

7

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

8

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

9

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

10

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6

䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7

1

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that

FCA US LLC offers to its customers:

• The Warranty with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity

• The range of additional services available to FCA US

LLC customers

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual:

INTRODUCTION 5

1

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears engraved on the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the

B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.

Vehicle Identification Number

Stamped VIN Location

NOTE:

It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

1

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

▫ Locking Doors With A Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

▫ To Arm The System: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

▫ To Disarm The System: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .16

▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st

Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

▫ Opening Power Top Remote Function . . . . . . .17

▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .19

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

2

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .23

▫ Autoclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

䡵 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

▫ Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .27

▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .40

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .75

䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical key, simply push the mechanical key release button.

Mechanical Key Release Button

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys.

Ignition Key Removal

1. Push the clutch pedal to the floor.

2. Bring the vehicle to a stop.

3. Apply the parking brake fully.

4. Place the shift lever into REVERSE gear.

5. Turn the key to place the ignition switch in the

OFF/LOCK position.

6. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.

7. Release the clutch pedal.

2


Ignition Switch Positions

1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)

2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)

3 — AVV (START)

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic

transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.


Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a signal to remove the key.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.

Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Locking Doors With A Key

You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.

2


NOTE:

A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.

If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics.

CAUTION!

• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle

and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-

ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE:

Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. When having the

Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition for unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle

Security Alarm will provide the following audible and


visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security

Light in the instrument cluster will flash.

To Arm The System:

Push the Key Fob LOCK button.

To Disarm The System:

Push the Key Fob UNLOCK button or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the

Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

2


If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF

EQUIPPED

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter

NOTE:

The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects.

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice,


within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate.

The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st

Press

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Opening Power Top Remote Function

The remote keyless power top function can only be used with the engine off.

Key Fob

NOTE:

The remote keyless power top function can be used to open the power top to the spoiler position.

Opening Power Top Remote Function:

1. OPEN — Push and hold the unlock button down on the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate

2


Power Top Open. The roof will stop opening whenever the unlock button on the key fob is released, or when it reaches the spoiler position.

NOTE:

If your power convertible top does not open with the remote, please refer to the

⬙Power Convertible Top

Relearn Procedure” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you:

• Before operating the power top, make sure that no

moving parts of the convertible top can injure a person or animal.

(Continued)


• Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near

the convertible top components, the upper windshield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top.

• When using the power top button on RKE trans-

mitter, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the button immediately to interrupt the operation.

• Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top

completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment.

• Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in

motion.

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Refer to “Sentry Key” in “Things To Know Before Starting” for further information.

If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.

Transmitter Battery Replacement

NOTE:

Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.


1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the mechanical key to access the battery case screw located on the side of the Key Fob.

Mechanical Key Release Button

2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob using a small screwdriver.

2


Key Fob Screw Location

3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the battery observing its polarity.

Battery Case Removed

4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the screw to lock it into place.


The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:


This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:


DOOR LOCKS

The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock.

Driver’s Door Lock Handle

WARNING!



(Continued)

2



• For personal security and safety in the event of a

collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic

transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.





(Continued)


• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or


CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.

Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.


Power Door Locks — If Equipped

A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the driver’s door handle

(indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock.

NOTE:

To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle, the doors will automatically unlock if the driver’s door handle is pushed when the key is in the ignition.

Autoclose

Driver’s Power Door Lock Handle

When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled using

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).

2


To change the Autoclose setting in the EVIC, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the MENU button “On” or “Off” will flash on the display (according to the previous setting).

2. Push the + or – button for setting.

3. Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Vehicle” for further information.

POWER WINDOWS

Power Window Switches

There are single window controls located on the shifter bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the driver and passenger door windows. The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the

ON/RUN position.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

Power Window Switches

Auto-Down

The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch for approximately one


second, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

2


LIFTGATE

To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock switches located on the front door handles.

To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.

Liftgate Handle

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous

exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,

make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed.

Do not use the recirculation mode.

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.

However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags


• Child Restraints

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to

⬙Child Restraints⬙) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child

2


restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front

Air Bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under

⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START position.


Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START position, an intermittent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an

2


intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.

Change Of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the

Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your

injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear

2

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In

a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle

will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-

ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.


Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

2


Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

Positioning The Lap Belt

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its


stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

2


4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a

Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the

Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically

required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.

• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can

increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.


Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.

Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

2


The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy

Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.

For additional information, refer to “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

Restraints” section of this manual. The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position.

• ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an

ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap


around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

⬙click.⬙

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic

Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.

Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!


an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front





How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

2


How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the

switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could

increase the risk of injury in collisions.

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain

occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Air Bag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Advanced Front Air Bags


• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Seat Track Position Sensors

Advanced Front Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air

Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags

2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster

3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air

Bag

2


WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.


an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front





Advanced Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air

bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag

covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional.

The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

Advanced Front Air Bag Operation

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

2


Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the


The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced

Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front

Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact

bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact

bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.


Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver

Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and


Supplemental Side Air Bags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental

Side Air Bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):

Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The

SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB

2


deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or

“AIRBAG.”

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The

SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events.


WARNING!

• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the

SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.

• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for

the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

2


The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint

Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.

The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left

Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced

Front Air Bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air

Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must

be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean

against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-

ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air

Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.


If A Deployment Occurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

2


• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller

System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pushed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pushing the hazard light button.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.

• Unlock the power door locks.

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset

Procedure

After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR to ignition STOP. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks


in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.

Customer Action

1. Turn Ignition OFF.

(Turn Signal Switch Must

Be Placed In Neutral

State).

2. Turn Ignition ON.

Customer Will See

Left Turn Light Is OFF.

Right Turn Light

BLINKS.

2


Customer Action

3. Turn Right Turn Signal

Switch ON.

4. Turn Left Turn Signal

Switch ON.

5. Turn Right Turn Signal

Switch ON.


Switch ON.


Switch OFF. (Turn Signal

Switch Must Be Placed In

Neutral State).


Right Turn Light Is ON

SOLID. Left Turn Light

BLINKS.

Left Turn Light Is ON

SOLID. Right Turn Signal

Light BLINKS.

Right Turn Light Is ON

SOLID. Left Turn Light

BLINKS.

Left Turn Light Is ON

SOLID. Right Turn Light

Is ON SOLID.

Left Turn light Is OFF.

Right Turn Light is OFF.

Customer Action

8. Turn Ignition OFF.

9. Turn Hazard Flashers

OFF (Manually).


System is now reset and the engine may be started.

If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.

Air Bag Warning Light

The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

AVV/START or MAR position. If the ignition switch is in the STOP position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to the MAR position. After the self-check, the Air Bag

Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag

Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The


diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the MAR position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

2


WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air

bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag

system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;


• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

2


In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children.

Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s

Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.


• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org

or call 1-866-732-8243.

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

2

Infants and

Toddlers

Small Children

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age

Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint

Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible

Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle


Larger Children

Children Too Large for Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age

Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat

Infants And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.

It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.

Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.

Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!


an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front





Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should


remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

2

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do

not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in

the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.

A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.


WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

2


Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined

Weight of the

Child + Child

Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

LATCH –

Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH –

Lower Anchors

+ Top Tether

Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

X X Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

X

X X

X

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System


seating position. These anchorages are used to install

LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

2

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the


LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In

This Vehicle

•

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the

LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?

65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

No

No


Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs

(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.

2

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.


Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Can the head restraints be removed?

Locating LATCH Anchorages

Yes

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.

You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.

Yes, all may be removed

LATCH Anchorages

Locating Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.


LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.

Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

2

WARNING!

This vehicle does not have a center seating position.

Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat.

Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting


Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section

“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child

Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.

If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.


WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-

stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

2


Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be

“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking

Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the

Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Can the head restraints be removed?

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?

Yes

Yes

No


Weight limit of the

Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.

Yes, all may be removed

Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

2


Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat.

You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.

Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints

Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether

Anchorage

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.

You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top

2


tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,

make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.


ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or

55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to

“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”

2


CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

WARNING!



• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.


vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.



(Continued)

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in

confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/

rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

(Continued)



• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

2


Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.


The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning

Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant

Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area

unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.

• Always make sure that floor mats are properly

attached to the floor mat fasteners.

• Never place or install floor mats or other floor

coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.

• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top

of already installed floor mats. Additional floor

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always

properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning.

• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the

driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.

• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-

stalled, if not equipped from the factory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.

2


Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.

Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED . .84

▫ Lowering The Power Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

▫ Raising The Power Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure . . . . .86

▫ Wind Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .88

▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

▫ Folding Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .91

▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

▫ Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .92

▫ Recline Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

▫ Seat Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

▫ EZ Entry Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

▫ Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

▫ Front Non-Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . .96

3

82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .98

䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

▫ Parking Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

▫ Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . .103

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .105

䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .106

▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . .106

▫ Rear Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . .109

䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .110

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

▫ To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

▫ To Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

▫ To Resume Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .114

▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display . . . . . . . . . .115

▫ Rear Park Assist Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . .115

▫ Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . .117

▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .118

䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .120

▫ To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

▫ To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83

▫ Emergency Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .122

䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .125

䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

3


POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED

On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the power convertible top switch is located on the overhead console. The switch contains two buttons. The passenger side button, is used to open the power top, and the driver side button, is used to close the power top.

Power Convertible Top Switch

NOTE:

• The power top buttons will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC/ON/RUN position.

• The power top can be remotely operated with the key fob. Refer to “Opening Power Top Remote Function” in “Things To Know Before Starting” for more information.

Lowering The Power Top

Auto Open

Push the top open button approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top open button for approximately one second a second time to fully open the convertible top.

Manual Open

For manual open, push and hold the open button until desired roof position or until spoiler position.

NOTE:

Vertical movement only operates in auto open/ close mode.

Raising The Power Top

Auto Close

From the convertible top fully open position, push the top close button for approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close button for approximately one second a second time for the one-quarter open position. Push and hold close button to fully close convertible top.

Manual Close

For manual close, push and hold the close button until desired position until one-quarter open position. Push and hold again for full close position.


NOTE:

Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000 cycles, or if scratching noises due to dust are present.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubes, and Genuine Part” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for information.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:

• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can dam-

age the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips.

• Remove any standing water from the top and dry

the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.

3


CAUTION! (Continued)

• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure

directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

WARNING!

The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision.

Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure

If your power convertible top does not operate in the

Auto Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/ closing to the one-quarter open and three-quarter open comfort stops), or if the remote keyless power top function is inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open the following relearn procedure may be necessary.

1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed.

2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using manual mode).

3. Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully open position.

4. CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an additional three seconds.

5. Release the OPEN button.

6. Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully closed position.

7. CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top begins to cycle fully open, then release the CLOSED button.

At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the fully open position, and then close to the 1/4 open position.

This will confirm that the relearn procedure was successful.

Auto Open/Close will now be functional. Trunk lid operation will be functional. Remote Keyless Power Top

Function will be functional.

NOTE:DO NOT interrupt this activity.

If the power convertible top does not relearn, repeat the procedure a second time.


Wind Stop

The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle.

The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operation. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up.

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror

The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).

3


NOTE:

This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse.

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. The

On/Off symbol on the button will illuminate when the auto-dimming feature is enabled.

Automatic Dimming Mirror


CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

Power Mirrors

The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door trim panel.

Power Mirror Switches

The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select switch to either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust.

3


Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Spotter Mirror — If Equipped

Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

Spotter Mirror

Folding Mirrors

The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rearward.


Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear

Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle” for further information.

Sun Visors

The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors.

Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

3


WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.


vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.



Forward/Rearward Adjustment

The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.

Adjusting Bar

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.


WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat

belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Recline Adjustment

The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline lever, lean back until the desired position has been reached, and release the lever.

Recline Lever

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

3


Seat Height Adjustment

The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.

Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump the lever downward to lower the seat height.

EZ Entry Feature

The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry feature for rear seat passengers. Pull upward on the release tether, located on the outboard side of the seatback, dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward to allow access in and out of the rear seat.

Height Adjuster

EZ Entry Lever

Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to its locked position once the rear passengers are seated.

Memory Feature

Both front seats have a memory feature, which can operate in two ways:

Memory Function Option 1 — Full Seat Back And

Track Fore/Aft Position Memory:

After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the position they were most recently adjusted to. This is accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright.

Memory Function Option 2 — Seat Back Only

Memory:

After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first be returned upright prior to going back to the last


fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in the seat back memory being set only – The track will then be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory position. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat has to be returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track position as described in Memory Function Option 1.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area.

Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. Push the switch a second time to shut the heating elements off.

NOTE:

Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

3


WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.

This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

Front Non-Adjustable Head Restraints

The non-adjustable head restraints are form fitted into the upper structure of the seatback and are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. The seatback should be properly adjusted to an upright position where the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your head.

Non-Adjustable Head Restraint

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seatback could cause serious injury.

Rear Head Restraints

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting

Your Vehicle” for information on tether routing.


NOTE:

To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

3


WARNING!

ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located on the left kick panel, rearward.

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

Head Restraint


3

Hood Release Lever

2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the hood, near the center, and raise the hood.

Hood Safety Latch Location

3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left side when standing in front of the hood) of the engine compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position.


CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

Hood Prop Rod

In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.


LIGHTS

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights, headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals.

NOTE:

The headlights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Headlights

Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward to the first detent for headlight operation.

Headlight Operation

NOTE:

When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime

Running Lights will be deactivated.

3


High Beams

With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever towards the instrument panel to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will turn on the high beams until the lever is released.

Parking Lights

To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and turn on the headlights.

Daytime Running Lights

To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.

NOTE:

The low beams and side/taillights will not be on with DRL.

If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using the display menus. Refer to “UConnect settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Turn Signals

Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right turn or downward to signal a left turn. The corresponding indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to indicate the operation of the turn signal.

Turn Signal Operation

NOTE:

The indicators will automatically turn off when the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is returned to a straight position.


Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay

When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.

Activation

Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by

30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.

3


Deactivation

Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and hold it for more than two seconds.

Interior Lights

The interior light switches are located in the overhead console. The interior lights can be set to three different positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right

Position).

Using the switch on the left overhead, push the switch to the right from its center position and the lights are always on. Push the switch to the left from its center position and the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights are turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side of the overhead console controls the map or reading function of the lights. Push the switch to the right to turn on the right light and push the switch to the left to turn on the left light.

CAUTION!

Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch is in the center position or that the lights are off to avoid draining the battery.

Interior Light Timing (Center Position)

There are four different modes of operation that can be activated in this position:

• When one door is opened a three minute timer is activated.

• When the key is removed from the ignition (within two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10 second timer is activated.


• When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated.

• When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off.

Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)

• When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated.

NOTE:

The timer is deactivated when the key is moved into the ON/RUN position.

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped

The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the instrument panel, just below the radio.

Fog Light Switch

Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Push the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off.

3


WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column.

NOTE:

The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Front Windshield Wiper Operation

There are five different modes of operation for the front windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access these modes:

Windshield Wiper Operation

Windshield Wiper Off

This is the normal position of the wiper lever.

Intermittent Wiper Operation

Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers will operate intermittently.

NOTE:

The Intermittent function only has one detent but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed. As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease.

Low Speed

Push the lever downward to the second detent. The wipers will operate at low speed.

High Speed

Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers will operate at high speed.

Manual High Speed/Mist

Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off.


Front Windshield Washer Operation

Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released.

3

CAUTION!

• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving

through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off.

• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch

and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.

(Continued)



• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents

the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Rear Windshield Wiper

Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for intermittent wipe operation. With the front windshield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate in the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at half the frequency. When the transmission is shifted into

REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at

Low Speed and return to normal operation when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.

Rear Wiper Operation

NOTE:

The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Rear Windshield Washer Operation

Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and

hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released.

TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal controls.


3

Tilt Control Lever

Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock the column firmly in place.


WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons


NOTE:

In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic

Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise

Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE:

The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.

3


To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a

1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.


Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE:

The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

3


On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use

Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia/ bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.

during a parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist

System Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system and recommendations.

The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE.

Rear Park Assist Sensors

The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately

12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle.

The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the underside of the car during the parking maneuver.

Rear Park Assist Warning Display

The Rear Park Assist Warning screen is located within the

Uconnect Settings. It provides audible and visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/ bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to

⬙Uconnect

Settings

⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for further information.

Rear Park Assist Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing arcs in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show solid arcs in the center rear region and will produce an audible alert. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent.


If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show solid arcs in the left and/or right rear region and will produce an audible alert. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent.

Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts

If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated.

The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away.

3


Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System

SIGNAL MEANING

Obstacle Distance

An obstacle is present within the sensors’ field of view

Failure

Sensor or System failures

INDICATION

Audible signal

(dashboard loudspeaker)

• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases.

• Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm).

• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information).

Visual signal

(EVIC)

• Arcs are shown based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear Park Assist Display” for further information).

Visual Signal

(instrument panel)

• Icon appears on display.

• Message is displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) (where provided).

While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not muted.

The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel to walls).

Failure Indications

A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the instrument panel warning icon and message displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display.

The warning icon is illuminated and a message is displayed on the EVIC display (if equipped).


Refer to

⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.

Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor is in failure condition, the EVIC shall indicate that the

Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is turned off automatically.

Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System

Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in (10

3


cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.

Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

Park Assist System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.

• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.

• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument cluster.

CAUTION!

• Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is

unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.

(Continued)


• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

(Continued)



• Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is

strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.

Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

3


POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead console.

Power Sunroof Switch

WARNING!


access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key

Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown

from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.

Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

To Open

Push and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position. Push the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second and release, the sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

To Close

With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second, the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second to completely close the sunroof.


Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express Close.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

3


Emergency Operation

In case of electrical failure, the sunroof can be operated with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box.

There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof. Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the desired location.

Sun Shade — If Equipped

For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or closed. To open the sun shade, push the tab and move the shade to a full open position.

Manual Sun Shade

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet, located in the floor console, for added convenience. This power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other low power devices.

Power Outlet

Power is available when the ignition switch is in the

ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position.


CAUTION!

• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13

Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

3


WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet

should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the

vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

Power Outlet Fuse Location – Underhood

F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console/Aux Power Outlet

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.


CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED

This is located on the center console, in front of the cup holders. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release the knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use.

3

WARNING!

When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.

To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off.


CUPHOLDERS

For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are located on the floor console between the front seats.

Front Cupholders

For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the floor between the front driver and passenger seats.

Rear Cupholders

STORAGE

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the glove compartment latch to open the glove compartment. Push the glove compartment door upward to close it.


3

Glove Compartment Latch

CARGO AREA FEATURES

The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow increased cargo capacity.


Push down the release button, located at the outboard top of the seatback and move the seatback to its foldeddown position to provide a flat load floor cargo area.

When returning the seatback to its upright position, push rearward until the seatback is properly latched.

Rear Seat Release Buttons

Folded Rear Seats

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel, below the radio.

Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a second time.

NOTE:

To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.


CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

3

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .134

䡵 TURBO BOOST GAUGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ECO . . . . . . . . . . .136

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .145

▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .156

▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .169

▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

▫ White Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION

CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

▫ EVIC Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . .176

▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

▫ Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

4

132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

䡵 iPod/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect

5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

䡵 UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK

TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

▫ Radio Operation And Mobile Phones. . . . . . . .203

▫ Harmful Interference Statement. . . . . . . . . . . .204

▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .205

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .206

䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133

▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . .207

▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .209

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

4


INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Side Vent

2 — Multifunction Lever – Light Control

7 — Passenger Air Bag

8 — Glove Compartment

3 — Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights 9 — Rear Defrost Button

4 — Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer 10 — Hazard Button

5 — Central Air Vents

6 — Radio

11 — Climate Controls

12 — Power Windows Control

13 — Storage Compartment

14 — Shift Lever

15 — Sport Button

16 — Horn/Driver Airbag

17 — Boost Gauge


TURBO BOOST GAUGE

Your vehicle is equipped with a boost gauge and integrated shift light indicator located to the left of the instrument cluster. The boost gauge indicates the intake manifold pressure relative to barometric pressure. The engine management system in your vehicle intelligently regulates intake manifold pressure based on environmental (ambient) and engine operating conditions.

Turbo Boost Gauge

1 — Turbo Boost Gauge

2 — SPORT Indicator

4


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ECO

ECO Instrument Cluster

1. Tachometer

• This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area, ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.

2. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

• The digital gauge will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, or up mountain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.


WARNING!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

4


3. Speedometer

• Indicates vehicle speed.

4. Fuel Gauge

• The digital display shows the amount of fuel in the tank.

• The switching on of the digital warning light indicates that 1 – 1.3 gallons of fuel are left in the tank; in this situation, refuel as soon as possible.

• Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty; any gaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalytic converter.

5. Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge/Turbo Gauge/ECO In-

dex Gauge

Depending on what options and trim level, your vehicle is equipped with there are three gauges available.

• Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge: This gauge shows what percent the gas pedal is currently depressed at.

• Turbo Gauge: This gauge shows the current turbo usage.

• ECO Index Gauge: The ECO Index gauge allows the driver to monitor their driving style in order to increase fuel economy. The efficiency of the driving style is displayed on a gauge located on the right side of the instrument cluster and ranges from a minimum value of

0 up to a maximum value of 5 (0 = low, 5 = high). A higher “ECO” index indicates a more fuel efficient drive style and will increase your fuel economy. A lower

“ECO” index indicates frequent accelerations/ decelerations and will decrease your fuel economy. The index is recalculated approximately every second and takes into account a combination of the instant fuel economy and your driving style during the current trip.

NOTE:

Different trips may have different values even if the same driving style is maintained. Some factors that may impact the calculated index value are:

• Traffic conditions

• Trip duration

• Temperature (engine and ambient)

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER


4

Base Instrument Cluster


1. Speedometer


2. Tachometer






WARNING!



WARNING!





4. Fuel Gauge




4


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Instrument Cluster

1. Tachometer







WARNING!



4


WARNING!




3. Speedometer


4. Fuel Gauge




5. Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge/Turbo Gauge/ECO In-

dex Gauge

Depending on what options and trim level, your vehicle is equipped with there are three gauges available.

• Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge: This gauge shows what percent the gas pedal is currently depressed at.

• Turbo Gauge: This gauge shows the current turbo usage.

• ECO Index Gauge: The ECO Index gauge allows the driver to monitor their driving style in order to increase fuel economy. The efficiency of the driving style is displayed on a gauge located on the right side of the instrument cluster and ranges from a minimum value of 0 up to a maximum value of 5

(0 = low, 5 = high). A higher “ECO” index indicates

a more fuel efficient drive style and will increase your fuel economy. A lower “ECO” index indicates frequent accelerations/decelerations and will decrease your fuel economy. The index is recalculated approximately every second and takes into account a combination of the instant fuel economy and your driving style during the current trip.

NOTE:

Different trips may have different values even if the same driving style is maintained. Some factors that may impact the calculated index value are:

• Traffic conditions

• Trip duration

• Temperature (engine and ambient)


WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

IMPORTANT:

The warning / indicator light switches on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.

Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication.

All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.

4


Red Telltale Indicator Lights


Red Telltale

Light

What It Means


This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.


Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped

This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).

Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

4


Brake Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

United States

Canada

What It Means

Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock

Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.


Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

4


Charging System Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Charging System Warning Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”


Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to

ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

4


Oil Pressure Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.


Engine Temperature Warning Light

Red Warning

Light

What It Means

Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

4


Door Open Warning Light

Red Telltale Light What It Means

Door Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed. .

• Driver’s Door Open

• Passenger Door Open

• Driver and Passenger Door Open


Liftgate Open Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Liftgate Open Warning Light

This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.

4

Transmission Fault Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Transmission Fault Warning Light

This light will illuminate (together with a message in the EVIC and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the engine.


Hood Open Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Hood Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.

Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

IMPORTANT:

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.


Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously

4


illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.


Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON even if it was manually turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds and flash the ESC activation light when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

4


Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. For further information, refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in “Starting And Operating.”


Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic

System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.

4


CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.

Immediate service is required.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.


Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

Rear Defrost Light

What It Means

Rear Fog Light Indicator

This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.

4

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Rear Defrost Light

This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes..


CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued) heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.


Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.

If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

4


Generic Warning Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Generic Warning Indicator Light

The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Oil

Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off

Not Available, Parking Sensor Failure, DST System Failure.

Icy Road Condition Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Icy Road Condition Indicator Light

This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.


Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light

This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.

4

Stop Light Failure Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Stop Light Failure Indicator Light

This light will illuminate if one or more of the stop light bulb fails.

The failure relating to this light could be:

• One or more blown bulbs

• A blown protection fuse

• A break in the electrical connection


Glow Plug Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Glow Plug Light — If Equipped

This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F

(–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. The Glow Plug light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 seconds.

If equipped with a block heater harness the message

⬙Plug In Engine Heater⬙, will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5°F (-15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start.


Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Green Telltale Light

What It Means

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

4


Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the cruise control has been engaged.


Blue Telltale Indicator Light

High Beam Indicator Light

Blue Telltale

Light

What It Means

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,

⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.

4


White Telltale Indicator Light

Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light

White Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC)

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display


The EVIC consists of the following:

• System Status

• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays

• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)

• Outside Temperature Display

• Trip Computer Functions

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Display

EVIC Control Buttons

Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the

EVIC. Push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to return to the main screen.

Push and release the UP button to scroll upward through the displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value.

4


Push and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the displayed menu and the related options or to decrease the value displayed.

NOTE:

UP and DOWN buttons activate different functions according to the following situations:

• To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.

• To increase or decrease values during settings.

NOTE:

When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers covered (for versions/markets, where provided) for a few seconds.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Setup Menu

The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a cycle. Push and release the UP and DOWN buttons to access the different options and settings

(setup).

The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU button. A single push on the UP or DOWN buttons will scroll through the setup menu options. The menu includes the following functions:

• Dimmer

• Speed Beep — if Equipped

• Trip B Data

• Audio Repetition

• Speed Display

• Buzzer Volume

• Navigation Repetition — If Equipped

• GSI Shift (manual transmission only)

• Exit Menu

Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without

Submenu

1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the main menu option to set.

2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button (by single pushes) to select the new setting.

3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the main menu option previously selected.


Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu

1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the first submenu option.

2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button (by single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu options.

3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the displayed submenu option and to open the relevant setup menu.

4. Push and release the UP or DOWN button (by single pushes) to select the new setting for this submenu option.

5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the previously selected submenu option.

4


6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).

Change Engine Oil Indicator System

Change Engine Oil

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will display in the EVIC display for approximately 5 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (do not start the engine.)

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times within 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

Trip Computer

The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It features a driver-interactive display (displays information such as trip information, range, fuel consumption, average speed, and travel time).

Trip Button

The TRIP button, located on the right steering column stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously described values.

• A short button push displays the different values.

• A long button push resets the system and then starts a new trip.

New Trip

To reset:

• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system manually.

• When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 miles or kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59

(999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset automatically.


• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the system.

NOTE:

If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the information associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be reset.

Start Of Trip Procedure

With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for over one second to reset.

Exit Trip

To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than one second.

Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing settings.

4


Tire Pressure

This function will be used to display the tire pressures individually for all four tires by location.

Trip Functions

Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip).

“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:

• Trip distance A

• Average economy

• Average speed A

• Travel time A (driving time)

“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:

• Trip distance B

• Average economy

• Average speed B

• Travel time B (driving time)

“Current Trip” can be used to display the figures relating to:

• Range

• Instantaneous consumption

NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip

B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” cannot be reset.

Values Displayed

Range

This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving conditions will not change. The message “----” will appear on the display in the following cases:

• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).

• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine running.

NOTE:

The range depends on several factors: driving style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the above notes.

Distance Traveled

This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.

Average Economy

This value shows the approximate average consumption since the last reset.


Instantaneous Economy

This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is constantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.

Average Speed

This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a function of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.

Travel Time

This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)

Dimmer

The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable of detecting environmental light conditions and adjusting the brightness of the instruments accordingly.

4


NOTE:

The brightness of the instrument panel may change while travelling following an event that causes switching from “day” to “night” conditions (or vice versa) in the passenger compartment (e.g. in a tunnel, on avenues in shadows, under bridges, etc.).

To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows:

1. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to set the required brightness level.

2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU

(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing settings.

Speed Beep (Speed Limit)

With this function, it is possible to set the car speed limit

(mph or km/h) to immediately alert the driver when the set limit is exceeded.

To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to enter the

Main MENU.

2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to select Speed Beep. Push and release the MENU button, push and release the UP or DOWN buttons to select Speed Limit activation (On) or deactivation (Off).

3. When the function is activated (On), briefly push and release the MENU button to display the presently set activation speed. Pushing the UP or DOWN buttons selects the speed limit. Push and release the MENU button to confirm selection.

NOTE:

The setting can be increased or decreased by

5 mph or km/h each time the UP/DOWN button is pushed for speed settings above 20 mph (32 km/h). To increase or decrease the set speed rapidly, push and hold the UP/DOWN button. Save the setting by briefly pushing the button when you approach the required setting.

• Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings.

To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” will flash on the display.

2. Push and release the DOWN flash on the display.

button. “Off” will

3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU


button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings.

Trip B Data (Trip B On)

Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display.

For further information, see “Trip Computer.”

For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push and release the MENU button.

2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to select Trip B data. Push and release the UP or

DOWN buttons to turn ON or OFF

3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings.

4


Audio Repetition (Repeat Audio Information)

With this function active, the EVIC display shows information relevant to the sound system.

• Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning activation or AutoStore.

• CD audio, CD MP3: track number.

To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system info displaying, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and release the UP or Down button to highlight

See Radio and push and release the MENU button.

2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for setting.


If the radio has Uconnect, refer to the appropriate

“Uconnect Radio Supplement” for further information.

Speed Display

When this function is activated the cluster will display the vehicle speed (MPH or km/h).

To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the speed display feature, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to highlight

Speed Display. Push and release the MENU button to enter the Speed Display MENU.

2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to select display deactivation “Off”, “MPH” or “km/h.”

3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen.

Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning

Buzzer Volume)

With this function the volume of the buzzer accompanying any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to

Low, Medium, High, and OFF.

To adjust the volume proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and release the UP or DOWN button, then highlight the Buzzer Volume. Push and release the

MENU button to enter the Buzzer Volume MENU.




GSI (Gear Shift Indicator)

This function may be used to set the Gear Shift Indicator in two submenus: “On” and “Off.”

• On – turns on a fuel economy upshift light in the instrument cluster, for optimum fuel economy, when operating in base driving mode.

• Off – the fuel economy upshift light is disabled.

To set the required option, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the two sub-menus.

2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to navigate the two sub-menus.

4


3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly push and release the MENU button.


5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to the sub-menu.

When you have made the required settings, briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings.

Navigation Repetition — If Equipped

With this function active, the EVIC display shows information relevant to the navigation system.

• The turn by turn indication

• The distance to next maneuver

• The name of the street (1 or 2 lines)

To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the navigation system info displaying, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to highlight

Navigation Repetition and push and release the

MENU

button

2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for setting.

3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings

Exit Menu

This function closes the initial menu screen.

Push and release the UP or DOWN button when the Exit icon is displayed, then push and release the

MENU

button to exit the menu screen.


to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.

Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar

4


WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the

possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into

your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.

• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-

havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.

NOTE:

• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:

• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software updates.

• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.

personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining

Your Vehicle”.


UCONNECT RADIOS

For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.

iPod/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF

EQUIPPED

This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB or AUX port, located in the center console.

1 — Auxiliary Cable Jack

2 — USB Connector

USB/AUX Port

4


UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and change the customer programmable features.

Many features can vary by vehicle.

Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons

On The Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the

Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and back arrow buttons on the faceplate.

Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.

Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.


Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect touchscreen.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect

5.0 Settings

Push the Settings button on the faceplate, to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable feature settings.

NOTE:

Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting and make your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or

4


press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings.

NOTE:

All settings should be changed with the ignition in the “ AVV/ACC ” position.

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

• Display Mode

When in this display you may select the “Auto” or

“Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the touchscreen.

• Brightness

When in this display, you may select the overall screen brightness with the headlights on or off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

• Language

When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Español/Français) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen.

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen then

“On” or “Off.”

Units

After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID). The following selectable units of measure are listed below:

• US

Changes the EVIC/DID to US units of measure.

• Metric

Changes the EVIC/DID to Metric units of measure.


• Custom

• Fuel Consumption

Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or “km/L.”

• Temperature

Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”

• Pressure

Select from: “psi” or “kPa.”

Voice

After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Voice Response Length

When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response

Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Long.”

4


• Show Command List

When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or

“Never.”

Clock & Date

After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Set Time and Format

When in this display, you may set the time and format manually. Press the “Set Time and Format” button then choose from a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”

• Show Time Status

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time

Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”

• Set Date

When in this display, you may set the date manually.

Press the “Set Date” button on the touchscreen then press the corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust.

• Sync Time — If Equipped

When in this display, you may sync the time with GPS.

Press the “Sync Time” button on the touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”

Safety/Assistance

After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen the following setting will be available:

• Hill Start Assist

When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control

System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and select “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Lights

After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.


• Daytime Running Lights

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on while the engine is running. To make your selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following setting will be available.

• Auto Door Locks

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph

(20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door

Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”

4


• Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock

When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button, you must push the

RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter

UNLOCK button.

Engine Off Options

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

• Radio Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a preset time after the ignition key is turned to STOP/OFF.

To change the Radio Off Delay status, press the “0 MIN” or “20 MIN” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.

• Radio Off With Door — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the radio will turn off when a door is opened. To make your selection, select from

“On” or “Off” on the touchscreen.

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and

Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

NOTE:

Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.

• Balance

When in this display you may adjust the Balance settings.

• Auto-On Radio

The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.

To make your selection, push the “Settings” button, then

“Audio,” then “Auto-On Radio.”

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Paired Phones

This feature shows which phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.


SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

• Tune Start

Tune Start begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song.

This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play. To make your selection, press the “Tune Start” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

4


• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.

• Subscription Information

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE:

SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.

Restore Settings

After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,

Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.

To restore the settings to their default setting, press the

Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking

⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or “No” to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating

⬙settings reset to default.

⬙


Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking

⬙Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” or “No” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating

⬙Personal data cleared”.

4


UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK

TIPS

Introducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0

system.

Key Features:

• 5.0” Full Color Touchscreen Display

• Bluetooth With Integrated Voice Control

• GPS Navigation (If Equipped)

Uconnect 5.0

Get Started

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.


2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or PHONE button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or PHONE button and saying a

Voice Command from current category.

All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

VR And Phone Buttons

1 — Push to MUTE

2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text

3 — Push To End Call

4 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions

4


Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button . After the beep, say ѧ

• Cancel to stop a current voice session

• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands

• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

Uconnect 5.0 VR


Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM

Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say ѧ

• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM

• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

TIP:

At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands.

Uconnect 5.0 Radio

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and

Auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices.

4


Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.

• Change source to Bluetooth

• Change source to iPod

• Change source to USB

• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play

song

Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical

TIP:

Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice

Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect 5.0 Media

Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the PHONE button and say Listen. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)


1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the PHONE button . After the beep, say... “Re-

ply.”

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes.

No.

Okay.

Call me.

Stuck in traffic.

See you later.

Start without me.

I’ll be late.

Where are you?

I will be <num-

Are you there ber> minutes yet?

late.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

I’ll call you later.

I’m on my way.

I’m lost.

I need directions.

Can’t talk right now.

See you in

<number> of minutes.

Thanks.

TIP:

Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit

UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.

Radio Operation And Mobile Phones

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the

4


antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation.

Harmful Interference Statement

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:


Additional Information

© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and

Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner

Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.

Uconnect System Support:

• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com

• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or

1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca

• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET

• Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET

• Sun., Closed

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.


The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/

AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/ enter an item while scrolling through menu.

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode.

4

Remote Sound System Controls

(Back View Of Steering Wheel)


Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather.

Manual Heating And Air Conditioning

Manual Temperature Control (MTC)

The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary dials and one inner push knob.


1. Temperature Control

Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

2. Blower Control

Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.

3. Recirculation Control

Rotate this control to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.

4


NOTE:

• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.

Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.

• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for

Defrost.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.

4. Mode Control

Rotate this control to change the system between Modes

(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).

• Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

NOTE:

The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

• Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

• Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

• Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that

require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

• Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE:

The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.

5. A/C Button

Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged.


MAX A/C

For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation modes at the same time.

ECONOMY MODE

If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn

OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the occupant to select a comfort settings.

• The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience.

• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.

The ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the occupant.

4


Automatic Temperature Controls

1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button

Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recirculation automatically. Push and release to select. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to

“Automatic Operation” for more information.

2. A/C Button

Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning

(A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the

ATC to switch into manual mode.

3. Temperature Control Up Button

Provides temperature up control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.

4. Blower Control Up/Down Buttons

There are 12 fixed blower speeds. The blower control up/down buttons regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you push, or hold, the blower control up button and decreases when you push, or hold, the blower control down button.

The blower fan speed may be set to any fixed speed by pushing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the

AUTO mode.

The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions.

5. Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.


6. Front Defrost

Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.

7. Floor Mode

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.

4


8. Panel Mode

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.

NOTE:

The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

9. Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.

10. Temperature Control Down Button

Provides temperature down control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.

NOTE:

If the temperature is lowered until

⬙Lo⬙ is displayed, all high voltage Heating, Ventilation, and Air

Conditioning (HVAC) systems are deactivated and ambient air is circulated according to the Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) control settings.

11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button

Push and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF.

12. Recirculation Control Button

Push and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when ON.

NOTE:

When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will flash if pushed. This indicates that you can not proceed to this mode due to fogging risk.

Climate Control Functions

Air Conditioning (A/C)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A/C system.

NOTE:

• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.


• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.

Recirculation Control

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pushing the RECIRCULATION control button. Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.

4


NOTE:

In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (indicator light shall blink) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature

Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate when on.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable

feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features” in this section of the manual.

Manual Operation

The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation.


Operating Tips

NOTE:

Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

Window Fogging

Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases, turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.

As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the

Defrost mode.

4


Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.

Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.

NOTE:

Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.

When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.

Summer Operation

Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system. When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while in automatic mode.

Winter Operation

When operating the system during the winter months, make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.

Vacation Storage

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service

(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the air conditioning system is started again.

Operating Tips Chart


4

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .223

▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .223

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .226

▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission. . . . . . . . . . .226

▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .230

▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .231

▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

5

220 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .239

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

䡵 SPORT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped. . . . . . . .246

▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped. . . . . .247

䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .248

▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .248

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .250

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .252

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .256

䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .261

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .262

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .263

䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .268

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .271

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .280

STARTING AND OPERATING 221

䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .280

䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281

▫ Premium TPM System With Comfort

Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

▫ Premium TPM System With (TFT) Tire Pressure

Display Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .293

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

5


▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .298

䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!




dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.


Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-

TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine. Press the brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear.

NOTE:

You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK.

Normal Starting

NOTE:

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

5


Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) position and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Cold Weather Operation

To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. An externallypowered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from your authorized dealer.

The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start.

CAUTION!

Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions.

Extended Park Starting

NOTE:

Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.

1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.

2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts.

3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the

Extended Park Starting procedure.

4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.

If Engine Fails To Start


WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.

5

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

CAUTION!

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.

• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-

ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.


After Starting

The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up.

Turbocharger “Cool Down”

This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.

Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during this time.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

Five-Speed Manual Transmission

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.

Shift Lever

Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.


Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear.

For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.

Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch.

Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NOTE:

During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission.

5


Recommended Shift Speeds

To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following table.

Downshifting

Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life.

CAUTION!

Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds

Engine

Size

1.4L

Turbo

Accel-

Rate

Units In mph (km/h)

1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5

eration

Accel

Cruise

14

(23)

12

(19)

23

(37)

18

(29)

29

(47)

25

(40)

38

(61)

32

(52)

If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released).

To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade.

When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade, downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened.


NOTE:

You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after

the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift an automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual

5

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, turn the engine OFF, apply the parking brake, and remove the ignition key. When the ignition is in the

LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, an automatic transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-

tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.


access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

(Continued)


• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/

OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the

LOCK/OFF position, and once removed, the transmission is locked in PARK.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission


out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the

ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

Six-Speed Automatic Transmission

The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.

You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

Shift Lever

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

5


The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information).

Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2,

3, etc.

NOTE:

If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,

REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position

(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE:

After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

(Continued)



• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others

if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear selector/shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in

PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

5

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift an automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, turn the engine OFF, apply the parking brake, and remove the ignition key. When the ignition is in the

LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, an automatic transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-

tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)



access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you

must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated.


• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

5


WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The

DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller will expand the

range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine coolant temperature.

Normal operation will resume once the engine temperature has risen to a suitable level.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.

PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.


In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

5


If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

AUTOSTICK

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, and many other situations.

Operation

When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position (beside the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.

NOTE:

In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.

• The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over-speed.

• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.

• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.

• You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or third gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful


in snow or icy conditions. To select second or third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift lever rearward (+) once or twice.

• The system will ignore shift commands that would cause engine lugging or overspeed. An audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested.

• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged because the transmission will not shift automatically.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when

AutoStick is engaged.

• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected.

To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the

DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels.

5


WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.

Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction

(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.

4. Keep tires properly inflated.

5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.

Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so.


WARNING!

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph

(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.

• Failure to follow these warnings may result in

injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

5

CAUTION!

• Always check the depth of the standing water

before driving through it. Never drive through

(Continued)


CAUTION! (Continued) standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

• Determine the condition of the road or the path

that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water.

• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving

through standing water. This will minimize wave effects.

• Driving through standing water may cause damage

to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued) damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can

cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

POWER STEERING

The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced or no power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.

If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER-

ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the

EVIC screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off.


Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE

POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed on the EVIC screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE:

• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.

Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.

5


PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear.

The parking brake lever is located in the center console.

To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely.

Parking Brake

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake

Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!





(Continued)



• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or


• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmission in FIRST gear or REVERSE gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

5


CAUTION!

If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.

SPORT MODE


In Sport mode, the engine is more responsive to the throttle pedal, and provides more maximum torque by increasing turbo boost pressure. Steering feedback is improved, and steering effort is slightly higher. This driving mode is useful for spirited driving.

1. To activate the Sport mode, push the SPORT button.

SPORT Button

Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.

3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate.



The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increase in effort and changes the transmission shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering.

1. To activate the Sport mode, push the SPORT button.

SPORT Button

Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

2. Push the SPORT button again to return to the standard driving mode.

5


BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System

Warning Light”.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic

Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.

Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal.


The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary.

WARNING!

• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their

effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.

• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent

the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.


• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system.

Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.

These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly.

5

(Continued)


Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not

“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the

natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.

• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping

wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.

This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or Full Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this


short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel.

HSA Activation Criteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• Vehicle must be stopped.

• Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or 7% grade or greater (automatic transmission) grade hill.

• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle in NEUTRAL [manual transmission], vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

5


WARNING!

There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.

Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

Disabling/Enabling HSA

If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the

Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in for further information.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.


ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission) ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission)

NOTE:

The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering column (Manual Transmission Only).

5


WARNING!

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-

vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

(Continued)


• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-

tain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect

ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the

ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

ESC Operating Modes

The ESC system has three available operating modes.

Full On

This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode.

This mode should be used for most driving situations.

ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below.

Partial Off

This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC

Off switch. This mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also intended for driving in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions, when more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction.


To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the switch again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation.

WARNING!

When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of

ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off

Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.

Full Off

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on public roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF, except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS

5


section. To enter the “Full Off” mode, depress and hold the ESC OFF switch for five seconds. After five seconds, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the

“ESC OFF” message will display in the EVIC. To turn

ESC ON again, momentarily press the ESC OFF switch.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And

ESC OFF Indicator Light

WARNING!

In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. The “Full Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or offroad use only.

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR

(ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than

30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.


TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

5

The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off or full off.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

2 — Size Designation

3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load

5 — Maximum Pressure

6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades


NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter

⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.


Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P

= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT

= Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

T or S

= Temporary spare tire or

31

= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145

= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80

= Aspect ratio in percent (%)

– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5

= Section width in inches (in)

R

= Construction code

–

⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or

–

⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18

= Rim diameter in inches (in)

5


EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95

= Load Index

– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H

= Speed Symbol

– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

• LL = Light load tire or

• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load

– Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure

– Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire


Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT

= Department of Transportation

– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA

= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9

= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD

= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03

= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 03 means the 3rd week

5


EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

01

= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 01 means the year 2001

– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term

B-Pillar

Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Maximum Inflation

Pressure

Definition

The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.


Term

Recommended Cold

Tire Inflation Pressure

Tire Placard

Definition

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door.

5

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)


Tire And Loading Information Placard

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting

And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.


To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

5


4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if

“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs

(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =

650 lbs [294 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).


5


WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause collisions.

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result

in overheating and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-

hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-

lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

(Continued)


• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle

to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.


Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.

5


At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.

The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.


Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.

5


Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire

(sidewall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,

Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use

Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.


Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a

“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph

(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

5


While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles

(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the

Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a

Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in

“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.

Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And

Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original

equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.

You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/

80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire


Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

5

WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than

50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.


Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.

This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.


Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

5

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tire Tread

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire


These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

• Distance driven.

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and

Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for more information relating to the Load

Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions


you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

(Continued)

5



• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are not recommended.

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type


tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.

Tire Rotation

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.

5


The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of

30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire


pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

CAUTION! (Continued) sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,

always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.

5

(Continued)


• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

Premium TPM System With Comfort Cluster

This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster.

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver

Module.

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

• Text Message Display

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be activated, and the “Low inflation pressure left or right front/rear tire” text message will display when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish


once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

TPMS Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text message will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:

• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the

TPM sensors.

5


• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.

• Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

• Using tire chains on the vehicle.

• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE:

Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly.

• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.

• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and the Low inflation pressure left or right front / rear tire message will still turn ON due to the low tire.

• However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the “Service Tire Pressure

Monitoring System” message will be displayed.

• This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the “Service Tire Pressure

Monitoring System” message will be displayed.

• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Premium TPM System With (TFT) Tire Pressure

Display Screen

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.


The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

5


Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a low pressure text message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure tire highlighted in a different color.

Low Tire Indicator

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need


to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure

Monitoring System” message in the EVIC for approximately 5 seconds.

Service TPM System Message

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light” will no longer flash, and the “Service Tire Pressure

Monitoring System” message will no longer display.

5


A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.

2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.

3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE:

• The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replacement tire installed without a tire pressure sensor.

• If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the

EVIC will still display a low pressure message and a tire highlighted in a different color.

• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a “Service TPM System” message.

• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” message.

Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will

turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the lowpressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.


This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:


FUEL REQUIREMENTS


This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 87.

For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of

91 octane or higher is recommended.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appropriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle.

5


Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.


MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

5


Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:

• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal

law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.

(Continued)


• The use of fuel additives, which are now being

sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.


Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-

tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every

5

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.

• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle

to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.

Fuel Filler Cap

CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emission control

system could result from using an improper fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued) into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

off” the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the

vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may

cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire.



• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened.

• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

5


Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a

⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.

TRAILER TOWING

Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition

Flat Tow

Dolly Tow

On Trailer

Wheels OFF the Ground

NONE

Front

Rear

ALL

Manual Transmission

Transmission in

NEUTRAL

OK

NOT ALLOWED

OK

Automatic Transmission

NOT ALLOWED

OK

NOT ALLOWED

OK

NOTE:

When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.

This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.

This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with the front wheels OFF the ground).

Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) at any legal highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL.


CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an

automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission damage.

Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

5

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .303

䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .303

䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .304

▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .305

▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .306

▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . .308

䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314

▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314

䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317

▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318

䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . .324

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .328

䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

6

302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .331

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332

▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the

Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.

NOTE:

With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

6


CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire

Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).

Tire Service Kit Storage

The Tire Service Kit is located under the front driver’s seat.

Tire Service Kit Components And Operation

Tire Service Kit Components

1 — Sealant Bottle

2 — Deflation Button

3 — Pressure Gauge

4 — Power Button

5 — Mode Select Knob

6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)

8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)


Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses

Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.

Selecting Air Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Use the

Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.

Selecting Sealant Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode.

Using The Power Button

Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power

Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.

6


Using The Deflation Button

Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions

• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and

Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to

“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)

“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.

Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location

• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.

• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material

from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.

• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire

Service Kit.

• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air

Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob

(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit

Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.

• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.


WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the

vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle

under the following circumstances:

– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately

1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

– If the tire has any sidewall damage.

– If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure.

– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.

– If the wheel has any damage.

– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel.

6

(Continued)



• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or

heat source.

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service

Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.

Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.

(Continued)


• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In

case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.

Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit

(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s

Hazard Warning flashers.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.

This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat

on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake.

(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the

Sealant Mode position.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire.


4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem.

5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

NOTE:

Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire.

(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The

Deflated Tire:

• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire

Service Kit.

NOTE:

Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.

• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the

Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.

6


NOTE:

Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.

If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service

Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.

Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.

Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant

Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power

Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit.

3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance.

NOTE:

If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air

Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the

Sealant Hose (6):

1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant

Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.

2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side

latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).

If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

NOTE:

If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service

Kit.

2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the

Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel.


3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”

CAUTION!

• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get

hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.

• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end

of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal

Tire Service Kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.

6


(D) Drive Vehicle:

Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.

Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.

Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

(E) After Driving:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air

Mode position.

2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.

4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure

Gauge (3).

If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door opening.

NOTE:

If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12

Volt outlet.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle.

4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center.


5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been repaired.

6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.

NOTE:

When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.

(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).

2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle.

3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant

Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly.

6


4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing.

5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).

7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/

Bolt Size

M12 x 1.25

66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m)

Steel Wheels Only

74 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m)

Aluminum Wheels

Only

Lug Nut/

Bolt Socket

Size

17 mm

**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.


Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

6

Wheel Mounting Surface

Torque Patterns

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.


WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is

on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for

changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

Jack Location

The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under the front driver’s seat.


Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or slippery areas.

Jack And Jack-Handle Location

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the shift lever in REVERSE.

5. Turn Off the ignition.

6


Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE:

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.

(Continued)


• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

be raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic

transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in

REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a

jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If

you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for

lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

(Continued)


• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.


NOTE:

Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of the

“Tires-General Information” under “Starting And Operating” for information about the spare tire, it’s use, and operation.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking

Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the driver’s seat.

2. Remove center cap.

6

Jack Warning Label


Center Cap Removal

NOTE:

Before using the swivel wrench to remove the wheel bolts be sure to remove the center cap of the wheel by inserting the angled tab end of the swivel wrench into the notched part of the center cap.

3. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel bolts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

NOTE:

• There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding)

• Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.


Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location

4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed.

6


Jack Location

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

5. Using the swivel wrench, raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

6. Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the hub. For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel bolts. For vehicles equipped with steel wheels the wheel covers must be removed to remove the wheel bolts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

WARNING!

To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges.

7. Install the spare wheel and hand start the wheel bolts.

Lightly tighten the bolts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.

8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.

9. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased


leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each bolt has been tightened twice. For the correct wheel bolt torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealership or service station.

10. Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the bag. Stow it under the driver’s seat and secure the bag to the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the vehicle.

6

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided.


11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.

NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.

WARNING!

A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.

Correct the tire pressure as required.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.

It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the engine compartment.

Battery Posts

1 — Positive Battery (+) Post (Covered With Protective

Cap)

2 — Negative Battery Post (-)


WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-

ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch

bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your

skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the transmission into gear and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

6


3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+) battery post. To remove the cover pull upward on the cover.

4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle underhood compartment) away from the battery.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.


5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then turn the key to RUN position on the vehicle with the discharged battery.

6. Once the vehicle is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

6


If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine.

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

NOTE:

Push the

⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system in

⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake

Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the

⬙ESC

Off

⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-

tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast

may lead to transmission overheating and failure.

It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:

1. Turn the engine OFF.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

6


3. Remove the shift lever override access cover (located on the right side of the shift lever housing) by prying at the bottom edge of the cover.

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole, and push and hold the override release lever in.

6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

Shift Lever Override Access Hole


TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The

Ground

NONE

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

NOT ALLOWED

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Flat Tow

Wheel Lift

Flatbed

Rear

Front

ALL

NOT ALLOWED

BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to

OK

If transmission is operable:

• Transmission in NEUTRAL

• 65 mph (104 km/h) max speed

NOT ALLOWED

OK

BEST METHOD

main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.

6


If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position.

If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.

Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not

attach to front or rear suspension components.

Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

Automatic Transmission

• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.

• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off the ground).

CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a

conventional automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission damage.

Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Manual Transmission

• Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.

• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.

• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off the ground).

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.


6

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .337

䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .338

▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339

䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .342

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352

▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362

7

336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .365

▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .365

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382

▫ Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam . . . . . .382

▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime

Running Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383

▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383

▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . .383

▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal

Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384

▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .385

䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE

PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick

3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

4 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses)

5 — Battery

6 — Engine Oil Fill

7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337

7


ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard

Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability.

The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to

access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.


For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s

Manual on the DVD.

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-

nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to diagnose or service your vehicle.

• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the

OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems, including

safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

• Access, or allow others to access, information

stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

7


serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should

not

proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.


available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are

7


MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-

form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.

(Continued)


• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes


after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range.

CAUTION!

Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil

CAUTION! (Continued) temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine.

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or

350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The

350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

7

(Continued)


Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection for turbocharged engines under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of

FCA Material Standard MS-12991.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)

SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.


Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Maintenance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

7


Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can

burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to

“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that

should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive

(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued) battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the

vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.


WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.

7


CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If

Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf

— If Equipped

HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

A/C Air Filter

WARNING!

Do not remove the A/C air filter while the vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or

(Continued)



ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and the blower operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the lower right of center console. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Remove the Torx screw that secures the passenger side console closeout cover.

Torx Screw Location

2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage the front retaining tab and remove the cover.

7


Console Closeout Panel

3. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (1 and 2) that secure the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing.

Air Filter Cover Screw Locations

4. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicators.


CAUTION!

The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often.

A/C Air Filter

5. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.

6. Install the passenger side console closeout.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned

7


should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.

Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock

Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass.


3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder.

7

1 — Wiper Arm

2 — Pivot Cap

NOTE:

The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.

2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Blade Pivot Pin

3 — Wiper Arm

4 — Wiper Blade Holder


4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place.

5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place.

Adding Washer Fluid

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze).

Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section for further information.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing

CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park

over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.


CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-

leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.

• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.

Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.

7


Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-

connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.

• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.


Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE:

Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to

MS.90032).


Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

7


CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued) rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic

Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10

Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F

(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer for assistance.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant


(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

NOTE:

• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact your local authorized dealer.

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If

HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,

7


have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant

(antifreeze) remains pressurized.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the

cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.

Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes

WARNING! (Continued) pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in

(Continued)

puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the bottom and top lines marked “COLD FILL

RANGE”.

As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.


Points To Remember

NOTE:

When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.

7


• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to

MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically.


WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services, or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is on.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.


NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with a manual

transmission

, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system. The two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one system will not affect the other system. The manual

transmission

clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See your local authorized dealer for service.

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

7


WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate

the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

CAUTION!

Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission.


Lubricant Selection

Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom of the hole.


Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Please see your authorized dealer for service.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water.

NOTE:

If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately.


Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain

7


the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions.

Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the

transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not


required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

7


The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR

Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials

such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi

(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.


• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

7


Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.

• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use

MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or

Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY

MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.

Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If

Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.

Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

Interior Care

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt


can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

7


CAUTION!

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.

CAUTION!

Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows

equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

Instrument Panel Cover

The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface.


Instrument Panel Bezels

CAUTION!

When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.

Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.

7


2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

FUSES

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.


Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-

priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.

(Continued)

(Continued)



• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition

is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-

rized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air

bag system, braking system), power unit systems

(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

Interior Fuses

The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control

Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the instrument panel.

Fuse Panel

7


Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number

1

2

F12

F32

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

3

4

5

F53

F38

F36

F43

F48

F13

F50

F51

F37

F49

Mini Fuse

7.5 Amp Brown

5 Amp Tan

5 Amp Tan

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

7.5 Amp Brown

7.5 Amp Brown

5 Amp Tan

5 Amp Tan

5 Amp Tan

Description

Right Low Beam

Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy Lights

Instrument Panel Node

Central Door Locking

Diagnostic Socket, Vehicle Radio, Climate Control System

Bi-Directional Washer

Passenger Power Window

Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling

Airbag

Vehicle Radio Switch, Climate Control System, Stop

Light, Clutch

Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node

Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor

Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number

13

14

F31

F47

Mini Fuse

5 Amp Tan

20 Amp Yellow

Underhood Fuses

The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover.


Description

Ignition, Climate Control

Driver Power Window

7

Front Distribution Unit

The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.


F11

F11

F14

F15

F06

F07

F08

F09

F10

Cavity

F01

F02

F03

F04

F05

F06

Maxi Fuse

60 Amp Blue

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

40 Amp Orange

70 Amp Tan

20 Amp Yellow

30 Amp Green

40 Amp Orange

40 Amp Orange

–

–

–

–

–

–

Mini Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

15 Amp Blue

10 Amp Red

5 Amp Tan

15 Amp Blue

Description

Body Controller

Audio Amplifier

Ignition Switch

Anti-Lock Brake Pump

Electric Power Steering

Radiator Fan - Single Speed

Radiator Fan - Low Speed

Radiator Fan - High Speed

Blower Motor

Powertrain

Horn

Powertrain

Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)

High Beam (Shutter)

Cigar Lighter

F30

F82

F83

F84

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

Cavity

F16

F17

F17

F18

F18

F19

Maxi Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

30 Amp Green

20 Amp Yellow

–

Mini Fuse

7.5 Amp Brown

25 Amp Clear

15 Amp Blue

15 Amp Blue

5 Amp Tan

7.5 Amp Brown

15 Amp Blue

15 Amp Blue

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

7.5 Amp Brown

15 Amp Blue

–

–

10 Amp Red


Description

Transmission


Powertrain

Powertrain


Air Conditioning

Heated Seats – If Equipped

Fuel Pump

Powertrain

Anti-Lock Brake Valves

Stability Control System

Fog Lamps

Sunroof/Convertible Top

Cooling Pump – If Equipped

Transmission

7


Cavity

F85

F87

F90

Maxi Fuse

30 Amp Green

–

–

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.

• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Mini Fuse

–

5 Amp Tan

5 Amp Tan

Rear Defroster

Rear Defroster

Description

Heated Mirrors – If Equipped

NOTE:

When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

Interior Bulbs

Overhead Lamp

Courtesy Lamp

Exterior Bulbs

Front Low and High Beam Headlamp

Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps

Front Fog Lamps

Front Side Marker Lamps

Front Turn Signal Lamps

Side Direction Lamps

Rear Turn Signal Lamps

Rear Side Marker Lamps


Bulb Number

C5W

W5W

Bulb Number

HIR2LL

W21/5W

H11LL

W3W

WY21W

WY5W

PY21W

W3W

7


Rear Tail and Stop Lamps

Rear Backup Lamps

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp

License Plate Lamps

Bulb Number

P21/5W

W16W

W5W

LED (See Authorized dealer)

NOTE:

Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.

If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam

NOTE:

Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.

1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp housing.

2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.

3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.

4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.

5. Reinstall the plastic cap.

Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running

Lamps

1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right.

2. Open the wheel housing access door.

Wheel Housing Access Door


3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp housing.

4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise.

5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.

6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place.

7. Reinstall the plastic cap.

Front Fog Lamps

To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer.

Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps

1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand access to side marker lamp.

2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.

7


3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replacement bulb.

4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.

5. Reinstall the wheel liner.

Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp assembly.

Tail Lamp Assembly Screws

3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from the lamp housing.

4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.

5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.

6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening screws.

2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly.

3. Disconnect the electric connector.

FLUID CAPACITIES


4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder.

5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and replace it.

6. Close the back cap locking it properly.

7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the guard caps.

U.S.

10.5 Gallons

Metric

40 Liters

Fuel (Approximate)

Engine Oil with Filter

1.4 Liter Turbo Engine

Cooling System

1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10

Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Manual Transmission

1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10

Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Automatic Transmission

4 Quarts

4.6 Quarts

5.8 Quarts

3.8 Liters

4.4 Liters

5.5 Liters

7


FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component

Engine Coolant

Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter

Spark Plugs

Fuel Selection

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000

Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-90032.

We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine

Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.

We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.

91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued)



• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

7


Chassis

Component

Manual Transmission – If Equipped

Automatic Transmission – If Equipped

Brake Master Cylinder

Convertible Top Rails – If Equipped

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

We recommend you use MOPAR C635 DDCT/MTX

Transmission Fluid

Use only MOPAR AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.

We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

We recommend you use Berulub FR 43.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .390

▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392

8

390 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.

Severe operating conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or

350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The

350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine

RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe

Duty.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

Check engine oil level

Check windshield washer fluid level

Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage

Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder as needed

Check function of all interior and exterior lights

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 391

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

Change oil and filter.

Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular

wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.

Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.

Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.

Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.

Inspect exhaust system.

Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.

8


Maintenance Chart

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV joints.

Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if necessary.

Inspect brake linings, replace if needed.

Inspect parking brake function, adjust as necessary.

Additional Maintenance

Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.

Clean and lube sun roof tracks.

Replace engine air filter.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 393

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Replace the spark plugs. **

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or

150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.

Replace the timing belt.

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

8


WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-

hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .396

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

▫ FIAT Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .397

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .399

▫ In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

▫ In Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400

䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .400

䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .401

▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402

▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402

9

396 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.

They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 397

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FIAT Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone:

1-888-242-6342

FIAT Canada Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-

465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who

9


has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan

Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer

Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)

465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the

DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West

Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.

9


You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE:

A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA USA LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct

problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA USA LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

• Call toll free at:

1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Or

• Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

www.techauthority.com


DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

9


significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.


9

INDEX

10

406 INDEX

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .358

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 41

Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42

Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 41

If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 78, 146

Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .345

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347, 348

Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . .207, 209, 347

Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Alarm

Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357, 385

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Anti-Lock Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 167

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .209

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 365, 367

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366, 367

Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

INDEX 407

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386, 388

Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248, 362

Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381, 382

Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 381

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 346

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .19

Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .385

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

10

408 INDEX

Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 295

Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368

Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .339

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Child Restraints

Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .69

Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .68

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .63

Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .59

Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363

Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

Connector

UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .187

Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357, 361

Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361

Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360, 361

Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . .357, 386

Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 172

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

INDEX 409

Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

Dipsticks

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366

Disarming, Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 155

Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 155

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Driving

Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing

Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 208, 209

Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

10

410 INDEX

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .110

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .151

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .173

Exit Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

New Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

Start Of Trip Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Emergency, In Case Of

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .339

Engine

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 295

Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342, 385

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 386

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Euro Twin Clutch Transmission

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 295

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 354

Exterior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 381

Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Flashers

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 169

Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Fluid Level Checks


Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386

Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .386

Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 163

INDEX 411

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386

Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296, 298

10

412 INDEX

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 385

Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow

Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 169

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136, 142

Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317

Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316, 318

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

Key Fob

Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

INDEX 413

Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 381

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 101

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 78, 146

Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382

Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 172

Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .161

Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 169

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 102, 169

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .153, 169

10

414 INDEX

Loading Vehicle

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

Locks

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351

Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314

Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363

Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281

MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346

Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .161, 339

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400

Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 365

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Frequency Of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365, 388

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342, 385

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 385

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 400

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .264

Power

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .122

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317

Pretensioners

INDEX 415

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

Radio Frequency

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 20

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

10

416 INDEX

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348

Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Power Convertible Top Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .205

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390

Seat Belt

Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 78

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 30, 33

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Security Alarm

Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

INDEX 417

Selection Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400

Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 102, 169

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274, 275, 276

Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386

Specifications

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Speed Control

Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

10

418 INDEX

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223


Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Steering

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .205

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Stuck, Freeing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328

Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .41

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .209

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .263, 264

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 268, 274, 401

Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268

Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268, 274

High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 265

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .281

Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 268

Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274, 276

Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

Tire Service Kit . . . . . . .304, 305, 306, 308, 309, 312, 313

To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .298

Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239, 240

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

Transaxle

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

INDEX 419

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 365

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .19

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277

Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 169

UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .187

Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Vehicle Security Alarm Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

10

420 INDEX

Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216, 380

Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352

Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 399

Washer

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106, 108

Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368

Water

Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 121

Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 208, 209

Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106, 108

Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.

©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.

FIAT, ABARTH and scorpion design are registered trademarks used under license by FCA US LLC.

Second Edition Rev. 1

Printed in U.S.A.

2 0 1 6

O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

FIAT

®

500 ABARTH

I N C L U D E S C A B R I O